JP7326092B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing games.

In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there has been proposed a technique for displaying character information of a character's lines in a different manner during execution of a super ready-to-win effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-77592 A

According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or recognition of the character image becomes difficult. Inconvenience may occur in display control.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control .

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player ,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
data relating to the first component and data relating to the second component are stored in association with time information relating to display timing;
The time information is information corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image,
The character image control means is
When one moving image is displayed, it is possible to display a character image added to the one moving image,
the first component and the second component can be changed in a predetermined period in which the character image is added to the one moving image and displayed ;
The effect executing means executes, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table. ,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled when the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, rather than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using the first component composed of first character information and the second component composed of first display setting information. and second data for displaying a second character image using the first component configured by second character information and the second component configured by second display setting information. ,
The second character image data table uses the first data, the first element composed of the third character information, and the second element composed of the third display setting information to generate the third character image. and third data that displays
The character image control means is
The second component related to the character image can be changed at a plurality of different timings during the predetermined period ,
a ratio of displaying a character image using the first character image data table or the second character image data table differs between when the setting value is the first setting value and when the setting value is the second setting value;
It is characterized by
This feature enables appropriate display control.
The game machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
A specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A, an image 245SG005t of character B, an image 245SG005u of character C, and a collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C) suggesting the control to the advantageous state is displayed on the display means. An advance notice effect and a setting suggestion of displaying a setting suggestion image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G that stops and displays a pattern of "cherry" or "watermelon") which is an image different from the specific image and is related to the setting suggestion on the display means. Effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display) that can execute the effect,
with
When the forewarning effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 as modification 245SG-8). , when the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and the characters A to The part where the group image 245SG005v of C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5),
moreover,
A moving image effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a moving image effect for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B);
a first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11, etc.) for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13, etc.) for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling display of moving images using the data in the first storage area;
A character image control means (for example, a video decoder 91AK143, a text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) that controls the display of character images using the data in the second storage area,
The data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information). containing data about a plurality of character image components;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (see FIG. 11-7, for example).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visual recognition of both the specific image and the setting suggesting image is ensured, it is possible to prevent the effect of either the advance notice effect or the setting suggesting effect from being lowered. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. Appropriate display control is also possible.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The display means is capable of displaying game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F and the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game,
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example, 8-39(F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, misrecognition of the game progress information display can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in specific display areas of the display means (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R),
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example, 8-39(B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G has priority over the decoration symbol in the symbol display area 5C. (the part displayed by
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the specific display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means includes an effect-related image display area (for example, a first pending storage display area 245SG005D and a second has a reserved memory display area 245SG005U),
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the effect related image display area, the setting suggestion image has higher visibility than the effect related image displayed in the effect related image display area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the first reserved memory display area The part displayed with priority over 245SG005D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the effect-related image display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means selects, as the specific images, a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low) and a second specific image (for example, a character A that indicates that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high). ~C collective image 245SG005v) can be displayed on the display means,
When the first specific image and the setting suggesting image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the first specific image (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-50(D), when the image display device 5 simultaneously displays the reel image 245SG005G and the image 245SG005s of the character A, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005s of the character A. part),
When the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed simultaneously on the display means, the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8- 50(E), when the image display device 5 simultaneously displays the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. and display a set image 245SG005v of characters A to C on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggesting image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the visibility of the second specific image can also be ensured. Both presentations can improve amusement in the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect execution means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means in the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), reel effect In the part where the "7" symbol indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit can be stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, a big win B or a big win C game state) as the special setting suggesting image on the display means (for example, a deformation As shown in FIGS. 8-51(C) and 8-51(D) as an example 245SG-10, when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win A, the reel effect is white "7". Symbols can be stopped and displayed, and when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win B or a big win C, black "7" symbols can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The effect executing means includes a non-suggestive image (for example, a "bell" pattern) that does not serve as the setting suggestion, and a first setting suggesting image (for example, a "watermelon" pattern) and the first setting suggesting image as the setting suggesting image. and a second setting suggesting image (for example, a "cherry" pattern) that suggests that a setting value more advantageous to the player than is set is displayed.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of image displayed in the setting suggesting effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The production executing means is
As the advance notice effect, the specific image is in a predetermined motion state (for example, as shown in FIG. A group effect that traverses from the direction to the left) can be executed,
The setting suggestion image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. part where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from deteriorating due to the specific image being in a predetermined operating state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player,
The production executing means is
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion that displays an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)) can be executed,
As the notice effect, the specific image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. , the image display device 5 displays the operation promotion image 245SG005H, and then the player operates the push button 31B to display the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the characters A to C. The part where any of the collective images 245SG005v is displayed),
As the setting suggesting effect, the setting suggesting image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detecting means without execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 , the reel effects are such that the operation promotion image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to display "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "" on the reel images 245SG005G. The part where one of the patterns of "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" is displayed stopped)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification effect, so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion, Since the setting suggestion performance can be executed for the player who is interested in the setting suggestion, the performance matching the player's taste can be executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 11 to 18 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, there has been a technology that allows character information of characters' lines to be displayed in different modes during execution of a super reach effect, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77592. In such a game machine, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or the recognition of the character image becomes difficult. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control.

(Means 11) A gaming machine capable of executing a game (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.), in which a moving image effect for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added (e.g., reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) ), a first storage area (for example, a storage area 91AKM11) for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area for storing data related to character images. 2 storage areas (for example, storage area 91AKM13), moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) for controlling display of moving images using data in the first storage area; Character image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of character images using the data in the storage area, and the data in the second storage area is the first component (for example, text a text image specified by image specifying information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information); can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image (see FIG. 11-7, for example).
Such a configuration enables appropriate display control.

(Means 12) In means 11, the character image control means can change the second component related to the common character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. (see, eg, FIG. 11-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means 13) In means 11 or 12, the character image control means uses information common to the specific image different from the character image (for example, field data constituting a color field) to obtain a second image related to the character image. Components may be variable (see, eg, FIG. 11-6).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means 14) In any one of means 11 to 13, the character image control means can display a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group (for example, a text image indicating "hot"). Yes, and the second component related to the specific character image may be changeable at a plurality of timings (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means 15) In any one of means 11 to 14, the character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component related to the character image (for example, (see Figure 11-4).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means 16) In any one of means 11 to 15, the data in the second storage area may include outline data (such as outline font data) that can be used to display character images.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means 17) In any one of means 11 to 16, when a specific element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "gold"), a glossy character image is displayed. , the character image may be displayed with an effect image added around the character image (see, for example, FIG. 11-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(Means 18) In any of means 11 to 17, when a special element is set as a character image constituent element (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"), a predetermined range (for example, the coordinates in the character or the display time ) in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, reddish purple, etc.).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel effect determination processing; FIG. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams showing determination ratios of each effect result of the reel effect. 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation accepting period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period for each variation pattern; It is explanatory drawing of each production|presentation which can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram relating to drawing layers of effect images; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a reel effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of a cut-in effect executed when no reel effect is executed; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the cut-in production|presentation performed at the time of reel production|presentation execution. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-1; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-2; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in effects and the determination ratio of effect patterns in modification 245SG-3; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios of the announcement effect and effect pattern determination ratios in Modified Example 245SG-4; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-5; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 245SG-6; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a set value suggesting effect executable period and a set value suggesting effect execution determination ratio in modification 245SG-7. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect mode of a cut-in effect that is executed when a reel effect is executed in modification 245SG-8; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect mode of a cut-in effect that is executed when a reel effect is executed in modification 245SG-9; It is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the big hit executed during execution of the reel effect in the modified example 245SG-10. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the advance notice effect executed when the reel effect is executed in the modified example 245SG-11; It is an explanatory diagram of a button operation acceptance period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period in the case of normal reach or super reach in modification 245SG-12. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of selection of the effect mode in the modification 245SG-13. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of cut-in effect suggesting a set value in modification 245SG-14; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".
(Description of Characteristic Portion 245SG)

Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 245SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-41.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 245SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 245SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 245SG003, a glass door frame 245SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 245SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 245SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 245SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 245SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 245SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 245SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 245SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left gaming area 245SG002L is provided with a general prize winning opening 10, and the right gaming area 245SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable prize winning ball device 6B, a general winning ball device 6B, and a general winning slot 10 from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 245SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 245SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 245SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 245SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 245SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 245SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

A first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 245SG005U are displayed on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U, there is a reserved memory display (reserved display) that identifiably displays the number of reserved memories of variable display corresponding to the special game (the number of reserved memories). done. A fourth pattern 245SG005F is displayed at the right end of the reserved display area of the image display device 5 . The fourth symbol 245SG005F is a symbol blinking during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in order to make the player recognize that the variable display is being performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 245SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 245SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 245SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 245SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 245SG003 are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body provided with an operation portion that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting switching switch 245SG052 is accommodated in the board case 245SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting switching switch 245SG052 are housed in the board case 245SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 245SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 245SG201.

Since the substrate case 245SG201 having the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 245SG003 is closed. The operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 245SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 245SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 245SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 245SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 245SG201. The display monitor 245SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 245SG201. That is, the display monitor 245SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 245SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 245SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 245SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 245SG, if the lock switch 245SG051 and the open sensor 245SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 as a set value change state. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting switch 245SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning OFF the lock switch 245SG051 while any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 245SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 is set as a new set value. be. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the setting value specifying command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 245SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 245SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 245SG025A, second reservation display 245SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 245SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 245SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 245SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) and jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 245SG002R. A game information display unit 245SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 245SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 245SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 245SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 245SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 245SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 245SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B may overlap.

Each of the first suspension display 245SG025A and the second suspension display 245SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 245SG025A and second pending display 245SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 245SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation storage is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 245SG025A is lit, and the second pending When the two LEDs on the left of the display 245SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 245SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 245SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 245SG321 and a second movable body 245SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 245SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 245SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 245SG321, and the second movable body 245SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 245SG322. An origin detection sensor 245SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 245SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic part 245SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a variation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment Super reach variation pattern special figure fluctuation time in which super reach effect such as super reach is executed Super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α in order of special figure fluctuation pattern is set long.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, it is once notified that the variable display result is a win as the reach performance of the super reach γ, and then that the variable display result is a big hit. There is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing a resurrection effect. For this reason, the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect is set to have a special figure variation time longer than the variation pattern of normal super reach γ and a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, it is exceptionally the highest (100%) variation pattern for the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. Table, jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 8-7 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-7 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-8 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-9 (C) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (F) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (C), the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state, "big hit" special figure assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" when the normal state or the time saving state is controlled to the big hit game state (this embodiment is 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6). In the characterizing part 245SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1. /140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state according to each setting value is respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 245SG004A or the second special symbol display device 245SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and FIG. 8-11 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment), or the predetermined number of special figures Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. In other words, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the resurrection effect are executed. No super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), super reach γ jackpot variation pattern with resurrection effect executed (PB1-5), super reach δ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which no resurrection effect is performed, and 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns in which resurrection effect is performed. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined using one variation pattern determination table, that is, the pachinko Although a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the setting value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α. is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation ( PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Variation pattern of loss of reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of loss of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of loss of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of loss of super reach δ (PS2-5) , a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of deviation of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ (PA2-5) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2) , 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). , and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Variation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns, that is, if the variable display result is deviation, super reach Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for loss is a fluctuation pattern for loss of super reach α, a fluctuation pattern for loss of super reach β, a variation pattern for loss of super reach γ, and a variation pattern for loss of super reach δ. Although each determination ratio exemplifies a form that is completely the same between each set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the pattern, the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ, and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the form of determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 245SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 245SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4" area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), or a pending memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer correspond to these commands, and the first special figure reservation storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the drawing reserved storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG.

Effect control CPU120, at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening, stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage. I will go.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on (245SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (245SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (245SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (245SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (245SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 245SGS501a (245SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at 245SGS502 (245SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (245SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (245SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (245SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 245SGS505, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (245SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (245SGS506).

In addition, when the second starting port switch is not on (245SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation memory number is the upper limit value (245SGS505; Y), the starting prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 245SGS503 and 245SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (245SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (245SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 245SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (245SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (245SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 245SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 245SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (245SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 245SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (245SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (245SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 245SGS513, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (245SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (245SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (245SGS515), and the process proceeds to 245SGS501b. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (245SGS514; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (245SGS516), the starting prize determination process is performed. exit. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 245SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 245SG, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display corresponding to the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the set value Result determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10) is selected, and the selected display result determination table is used to set the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "jackpot" and the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not to control to a small hit game state as a determination of whether to control to a special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 245SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 245SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state at machine 1 (245SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and is in a short time state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. , and specify that it is in a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 245SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (245SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (245SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) Set the display result determination table, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and the setting value is 2 And if the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2 and the game state is a variable If there is, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. ) to set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. to set.

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 4 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the setting value is 5 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (D), the set value is 6 and the game state is normal state or time saving state shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) Set the first special figure display result determination table, and set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 1 and if the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the setting value is 2 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) Set the table, if the set value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), set the set value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set, and if the set value is 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (245SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In addition, in the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a big hit, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is out of the numerical range of the big hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 245SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (245SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 245SGS525 (245SGS527). If it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined that it will be lost in the variable display (245SGS527; N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" The command transmission setting is executed (245SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (245SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (245SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. (245SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), and proceeds to 245SGS536 (245SGS530).

When it is determined at 245SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (245SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (245SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (245SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern (245SGS535 ), go to 245SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 245SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (245SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". Execute (245SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (245SGS532), and proceed to 245SGS536.

In addition, in this characteristic part 245SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern in common. 701 to 997 are assigned super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Even if the number of pending memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used. is determined.

After executing any of the processes of 245SGS529, 245SGS530, 245SGS532, and 245SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (245SGS536). In this characteristic part 245SG, as shown in FIG. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 245SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (245SGS537), the random value determination processing at the time of winning is ended.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing portion 245SG. In this characteristic portion 245SG, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a portion for executing an error notification process (245SGS078) is added to the effect control main process of FIG. 6 explained in the basic explanation.

In the error notification process (245SGS078), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received from the main substrate 11, and if the error designation command is received, the received error designation The error detected by the CPU 103 is specified from the command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to display the error notification image 245SG005J (see FIG. 8-39) corresponding to the identified error on the image display device 5. FIG.

FIG. 8-18 is part of a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in the characterizing section 245SG. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 239SG, after executing the prefetching notice determination processing (step S71), after executing the pending display update processing (245SGSGS072) and the fourth symbol variable display update processing (245SGSGS073), S170 shown in FIG. ∼ S177 is executed.

In addition, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 of the characteristic part 245SG, four commands such as a start winning opening designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category designation command and a reservation number notification command are set as one set. A win-time receive command buffer having a storage area (entry) for storing separately from 2 special figure reservation storage is provided.

In the pending display update process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of stored commands "B100 (H)" indicating the first start winning opening as the starting opening winning designation command stored in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. , the number of displayed reserved memories in the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D is updated. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the number of stored commands of "B200 (H)" indicating the second start winning opening as the starting opening winning designation command stored in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, Update the displayed number of reserved memories in the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U.

Further, in the fourth symbol variable display update process (245SGSGS073), the effect control CPU 120 blinks the fourth symbol 245SG005F when the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display. .

8-19 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 245SGS271 (245SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (245SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (245SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number (245SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 245SGS272 or 245SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (245SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (245SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, when the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is displayed. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, for example, a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are arranged in an odd number other than "7" or "3" as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are "7" or "3" as a stop pattern (jackpot design). Also, if the received display result designation command is the result designation command of the fifth variable table that indicates a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", or three consecutive even numbers (or (odd number), etc., to determine a combination of decoration patterns (small hit pattern). When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 245SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 displays a reel image 245SG005G on the image display device 5, and performs a variable display within the reel image 245SG005G to perform a reel effect for executing a reel effect of stopping and displaying predetermined symbols. Decision processing (245SGS276a) is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (245SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 245SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (245SG277; Y), cut for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in effect to be described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. In effect determination processing (245SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 245SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (245SG277; N), the process proceeds to 245SGS279 without executing the process of 245SGS278.

Then, at 245SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (245SGS279). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, the notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display of the non-reach fluctuation pattern except for the shortened non-reach, and the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. The variable display is an effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach timing.

After executing 245SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (245SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (245SGS281).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (245SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 245SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (245SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (245SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (245SGS285).

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the reel effect determination process (245SGSGS276a) executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the reel effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the game state at that time (245SGSGS291). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is the normal state (low probability/low base state) (245SGSGS292).

If the specified gaming state is not the normal state (245SGSGS292; N), the reel effect determination process is terminated. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 245SG, the execution of the reel effect is not determined in the time-saving state (low-probability-high base state) or probability-variable state (high-probability-high base state) which are game states other than the normal state.

On the other hand, if the specified game state is the normal state (245SGSGS292; Y), the variable display result is specified based on the setting value at that time and the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 (245SGSGS293). ).

Then, based on the specified setting value, it is determined whether or not to display a "cherry" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be stopped and displayed) (245SGSGS294). These "cherry" symbols are determined by extracting a cherry symbol random value, and the extracted cherry symbol random value is a winning determination value associated with each set value in a cherry symbol determination table (not shown). is determined according to the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21(A).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A), when the set value is set to 1, display of the "cherry" pattern is determined at a rate of 0.5%, and the set value is set to 2. If the set value is set to 1.0%, the display of the "cherry" pattern will be determined, and if the setting value is set to 3, the display of the "cherry" pattern will be displayed at the rate of 1.5%. is determined, and when the setting value is set to 4, the display of the "cherry" pattern is determined at a rate of 2.0%, and when the setting value is set to 5, 2.5% The display of the "cherry" pattern is determined by the ratio, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "cherry" pattern is determined by the ratio of 3.0%. In other words, the ratio of determining the display of the "cherry" pattern is small, but the larger the set value is, the more likely it is to be determined.

When the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined as the performance result of the reel performance (245SGSGS295; Y), the determined performance result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel performance determination processing is terminated, while the performance result of the reel performance is completed. (245SGSGS295; N), it is determined whether or not to display the "watermelon" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be stopped and displayed) based on the set value. (245SGSGS296). As for the determination of whether or not to display these "watermelon" symbols, as in the above-described determination of whether or not to display the "cherry" symbols, the watermelon symbol random number is extracted and The random number is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. It's like

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when the set value is set to 1, the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined at a rate of 6.5%, and the set value is set to 2. , the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined at a rate of 1.0%, and the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined at a rate of 1.5% when the setting value is set to 3. is determined, and when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined at a rate of 2.0%, and when the set value is set to 5, a rate of 2.5% The display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined by the ratio, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined by the ratio of 3.0%. In other words, the ratio of determining the display of the "watermelon" symbol is higher than that of the "cherry" symbol, and the greater the set value, the more likely it is to be determined than the "cherry" symbol. there is

When the display of the "watermelon" pattern is determined as the performance result of the reel performance (245SGSGS297; Y), the determined performance result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel performance determination process is terminated, while the performance result of the reel performance is completed. (245SGSGS297; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result specified in 245SGSGS293 is a big hit (245SGSGS298).

If the variable display result is not a big hit (245SGSGS298; N), the process advances to 245SGSGS300d, while if the variable display result is a big hit (245SGSGS298; Y), the reel effect effect result (stop display) based on the set value It is decided (245SGSGS299) whether or not to display the "7" symbol (seven symbol) as the symbol). As for the determination of whether or not to display these "7" symbols, as in the above-described determination of whether or not to display the "cherry" symbol, the seven symbol random number is extracted and the extracted seven symbol The random number is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. It's like

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "7" pattern is determined at a rate of 1%, and the set value is set to 5. When the set value is set to 6, the display of the "7" pattern is determined at a rate of 3%, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "7" design is determined at a rate of 5%. is set to any one of 1 to 3, the display of the "7" symbol is not determined. Therefore, by displaying the "7" symbol, it is definitely notified that the game will be a big hit, and that the set value is 4 or more.

When the display of "7" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300a; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated, while the effect result of the reel effect is completed. 245SGSGS300a; N), proceed to 245SGSGS300d, and based on the variable display result specified in 245SGSGS293, the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be displayed stopped) is " It is determined whether or not to display the Super Hot" symbol (245SGSGS300d).

Also in determining whether or not to display these "hot" symbols, random numbers for hot hot symbols are extracted, and the extracted random numbers for hot hot symbols are variably displayed in a hot hot pattern determination table (not shown). It is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. It has become so.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), when the variable display result is a big hit, the display of the "hot" pattern is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variable display result is other than the big hit. In the case of a small hit or a loss, the display of the "Gekiatsu" pattern is determined at a rate of 1%. Therefore, when the "hot" pattern is displayed, there are very few cases where a big win is not achieved, and a big win is almost certainly achieved.

Then, when it is decided to display the "hot" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300e; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated, while the reel effect (245SGSGS300e; N), display the "chance" pattern as the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be displayed stopped) based on the result of the variable display. (245SGSGS300f).

In deciding whether or not to display these "chance" symbols, a chance symbol random number value is extracted, and the extracted chance symbol random number value is used as a variable display result in a chance symbol determination table (not shown). The ratio shown in FIG. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), when the variable display result is a big win, the display of the "chance" pattern is determined at a rate of 50%, and the variable display result is a small win other than a big win. In the case of hit or miss, display of the "chance" pattern is determined at a rate of 30%. Therefore, when the "chance" symbol is displayed, there is a high possibility of a big win.

Then, when the display of the "chance" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300g; Y), the determined effect result is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated, while the reel effect is performed. When the display of the "chance" pattern is not determined as the effect result (245SGSGS300g; N), it is determined whether or not the "bell" pattern is to be displayed as the effect result of the reel effect (symbol to be stopped and displayed) (245SGSGS300h). ).

Also in determining whether or not to display these "bell" patterns, a random number for the bell pattern is extracted, and the extracted random number for the bell pattern is displayed in a bell pattern determination table (not shown) as winning/non-winning, respectively. The percentage shown in FIG. 8-21(F) is determined depending on whether or not the winning determination value is matched.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(F), 90% of the time it is determined to display the “bell” design, and 10% of the time it is determined not to display the “bell” design. .

Then, when the display of the "bell" pattern is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300i; Y), the determined result of effect is stored (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated. When the display of the "bell" symbol is not determined as a result of the effect (245SGSGS300i;N), the reel effect determination process is terminated as it is, so that the reel effect is not executed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-21(A) to 8-21(F), each pattern of "Cherry", "Watermelon", "7", "Extremely hot", and "Chance" While it is determined whether or not to display at a ratio according to the setting value set to 1 and the variable display result, the "bell" pattern is a constant regardless of these setting values and variable display results. It is a pattern that determines whether or not to display in proportion. In other words, when one of the symbols “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “7”, “Extremely Hot”, and “Chance” is stopped and displayed on the reel image 245SG005G as the effect result of the reel effect, the pachinko game machine 1 While the set value and variable display result are suggested, nothing is suggested when the "bell" symbol is stop-displayed on the reel image 245SG005G as the effect result of the reel effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 245SG, the reel effect is exemplified as being executable only during the variable display of the low probability/low base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect is: It may be executable during variable display of probability variable state and time saving state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state).

As shown in FIG. 8-37, the reel effect in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment is such that the player operates the stick controller 31A before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the start of the variable display. By doing so, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5, and variable display is executed in the reel image 245SG005G (reel variation is executed). Then, as a performance result, one of the symbols "Cherry", "Watermelon", "7", "Extremely Hot", "Chance", and "Bell" is stopped and displayed in the reel image 245SG005G.

In addition, after any one of the symbols “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “7”, “Extremely Hot”, “Chance”, and “Bell” is stopped and displayed in the reel image 245SG005G, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed as the variable If the display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variation pattern, it will be hidden at the timing before the reach, and if the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern variable display, it will be hidden at the timing before the end of the variable display. do.

8-22 to 8-24 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-19. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (245SGS301). If the variation pattern is a super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (245SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern is a super reach γ or super reach δ variation pattern (245SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (245SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (245SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (245SGS303). . When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (245SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (245SGS304), and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS306), and 245SGS308. proceed to In addition, in 245SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, the cut-in effect in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 and 8-40, the image of the push button 31B (operation A promotion image 245SG005H) is displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to patterns.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-40, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays a cut-in image 245SG005w with a blue effect, and the effect pattern is If it is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 245SG005x with a red effect. If the production pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 245SG005z with a rainbow effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS307), Go to 245SGS308. In addition, in the 245SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C. determined by the ratio of In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 245SGS306 or 245SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (245SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (245SGS308; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (245SGS309, 245SGS310). ), and terminates the cut-in effect determination process.

Also, in 245SGS303, if the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect (245SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the pachinko game machine 1. (245SGS311), and determines whether or not the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (245SGS312). The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, when execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of cut-in effect times out, a process table for cut-in effect corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table each time the variable display effect process is executed. 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (245SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS3315; Y), a cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. (245SGS3316), and executes the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310. In addition, in the 245SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (B), the cut-in Non-execution of production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs cut-in effects based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS317), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (B), the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot C. Runs are determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

Incidentally, if the variable display result is a failure in 245SGS313 (245SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern are determined (245SGS318), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-25(B), in 245SGS318, based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is reduced to 55%. Decide on a percentage. Also, as a cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 245SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (245SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. (245SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (245SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS322; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS324; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined (245SGS325), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In the 245SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-25(C), the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS324; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 245SGS326), 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-25(C), the 245SGS326 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 245SGS322 (245SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS328), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (245SGS327; N), the set value is 4 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS329), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is not 4 in 245SGS321 (245SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5. (245SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (245SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS333; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (245SGS334), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 245SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-25(D), the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS333; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 245SGS335), 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-25(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 245SGS331 (245SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (245SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS337), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (245SGS336; N), the set value is 5 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS338), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 245SGS330 is not 5 (245SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a big hit (245SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS341; Y), the presence or absence of execution of cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined (245SGS342), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 245SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-25(E), based on the setting value being 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS341; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 245SGS343), 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-25(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss at 245SGS339 (245SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (245SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is a high-probability-high base state (245SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS345), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (245SGS344; N), the set value is 6 and the variable display result is out and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS346), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variation pattern of super reach δ is (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 245SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS351). . Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS351; Y), the jackpot type is specified (245SGS352), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS353).

When the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B (245SGS354), and 245SGS308. ~245SGS310 processing is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-26, the 245SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. FIG. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (245SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (245SGS355), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is performed. to run. Incidentally, in 245SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-26, based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

Incidentally, if the variable display result is a failure in 245SGS351 (245SGS351; N), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is failure (245SGS356), and 245SGS308 to 245SGS310. process. Incidentally, in 245SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-26, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 35%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the performance is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, it is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Big hit expectation in cut-in effect: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-25, 8-26 and 8-28, the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 when executing variable display with the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ. The execution ratio is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ deviation/super reach δ deviation. Then, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance, the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute the resurrection performance - the super reach γ jackpot/super reach δ jackpot, the set value. is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern. is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to increase.

Also, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, When the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, while it is determined that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the big wins A to C), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. is 4 to 6, even if the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result may be wrong. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3. The expectation of a big hit is set low when the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ is executed, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we focus on the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 more than the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) that executes the resurrection effect. and pattern CI-4 are set low. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the cut-in effect is executed in CI-3 and the failure is notified, so that the pachinko game machine In spite of the player recognizing that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed later and the big win is notified, thereby pachinko. This prevents the player from being discouraged when the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, which becomes indefinite.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. If you pay attention to it, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for all set values, but when the variable display result is a loss. , the higher the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 (the ratio of execution of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting values are 4 to 6: setting value 4 < setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is different. Since the frequency becomes higher, the player can expect that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. there is

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. , if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display results are different, if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the game state is the low-probability-high-base state or the low-probability state. The pattern CI-3 is set to perform the cut-in effect at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that the game state is low-probability. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of the set values 4 to 6, so that the player can be urged to continue the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-25(B) to 8-25(E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in. The performance execution ratio is set high. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, it is suggested that any of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is lost. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed. It is possible to improve amusement in games.

8-25 and 8-26 are merely examples, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect pattern is determined according to the game machine to which the present invention is applied. You may make it differ from characteristic part 245SG suitably. However, if the determination ratio of the effect pattern of these cut-in effects is appropriately changed, the tendency of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of each effect pattern (the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the cut-in effect: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained so that a player does not misunderstand the degree of expectation for a big win according to the production pattern of the cut-in production when the cut-in production is executed. is desirable.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this example, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the setting value set in the variable display and the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super In the case of performing variable display with the variation pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In this way, when the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, The percentage assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 245SG. By doing so, it is possible to improve interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, while preventing excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-19. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (245SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (245SGS362). If the variable display result is a small hit (245SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and if the variable display result is a big hit or a loss (245SGS362; N), execution of cut-in effect is further determined. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not any cut-in effect pattern is stored (245SGS363).

If execution of cut-in effect is determined (245SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (245SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (245SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (245SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (245SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (245SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (245SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (245SGS367), and the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (245SGS368).

If the variable display result is a failure (245SGS366; N), whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (245SGS369).

Specifically, in the process of 245SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), when the result of the variable display is a big win, it is decided not to execute the notice effect at a rate of 15%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, as described above, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost is set to the pachinko game machine 1. This is the case where the set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIG. 8-30(C), pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern in which an image 245SG005s of character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect. pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 245SG005t of character B is displayed with a red effect in the image display device 5, and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 245SG005u of character C is displayed with a gold effect on the image display device 5. is an effect pattern for displaying a collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow effect.

Further, in the process of 245SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 245SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), the non-execution of the notice effect is reduced by 50%. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach loss), non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost) excluding shortened non-reach, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the advance notice effect in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment is during variable display (if the reach fluctuation pattern is being variable displayed, the period from the start of the variable display to the reach becomes middle), the image of the push button 31B (operation prompting image 245SG005H) is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display a character image according to the pattern.

Therefore, if the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach, the period for executing the notice effect will be extremely short (for example, the non-reach variation pattern (PA1- If the notice effect is executed during the variable display in 3), the period for displaying the operation prompting image 245SG005H is extremely short, about 1 second, and the period for displaying the character image is about 1 to 2 seconds. In the characteristic part 245SG, when the variation pattern is shortened non-reach, the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern is shortened non-reach. Even in some cases, the advance notice effect may be executed during the variable display.

As described above, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is patterned. When executed in YE-1, when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-2, when the notice effect is executed in YE-3, when the notice effect is executed in YE-4. It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is high (Expectation of the big hit of the advance notice effect: non-execution of notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), when it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2 is determined, there is provided a case where the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is jackpot C. For this reason, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is also determined whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, or a variable display result is a big hit as a production pattern of cut-in production. In the case where the pattern CI-4 that determines that the jackpot type is the jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the variation pattern. It is set to never run. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so that the cut-in effect is started when the variable display result is a big hit. This prevents the player from recognizing it at a timing (starting timing of the advance notice effect) before the timing. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss, both the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect are not executed in the effect pattern with a high expectation of the big win, so the player is excessively concerned about the variable display result becoming a big win. It is prevented to expect

After executing any one of 245SGS365, 245SGS368, and 245SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (245SGS370). When the execution of the notice effect is determined (245SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any one of the processing of 245SGS365, 245SGS368, and 245SGS369 is stored (245SGS371), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to perform the notice. The effect determination process is terminated (245SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (245SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 245SGS371 and 245SGS372.

It should be noted that, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for advance notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9) in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for notice effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed. etc.) can be used to execute the forewarning effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the reel effect, the cut-in effect, and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, FIGS. As shown in 32 (A), in the variation pattern of non-reach loss (excluding shortened non-reach loss), the notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during variable display, and normal reach loss fluctuation In the pattern, it is possible to execute the notice effect in the period before the reach during variable display with pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. During the period before reach during display, the advance notice effects can be executed in patterns YE-1 to YE-3. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 245SG, it is possible to execute the reel performance during the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss, and the special figure fluctuation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss is set to 3.75 seconds at the shortest. there is Therefore, the execution period of the reel effect including the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A in the characteristic portion 245SG is set to approximately 3 seconds to 3.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-3 in the period before reach. Thus, cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34, in the variation patterns of the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect and the super ready-to-win γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the notice effect is patterned in the period before the ready-to-win effect. Patterns YE-1 to YE-4 can be executed, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, in any case, the player operates the stick controller 31A during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the advance notice effect. As a result, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reel effect is executed.

It should be noted that during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A in the reel effect, unlike the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B for the notice effect and the cut-in effect, the image display device 5 allows the player to operate the stick controller 31A. No prompting image is displayed. In other words, unlike the notice effect and the cut-in effect, the reel effect in the characteristic portion 245SG is an effect that will not be executed unless the player operates the stick controller 31A during the operation accepting period of the stick controller 31A. .

Furthermore, since the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A in the reel effect and the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the notice effect do not overlap, the player can operate the stick controller 31A for executing the reel effect and the character as the notice effect. There is no need to simultaneously perform the operation of the push button 31B for displaying the image, and the player's operation for performing the effect is prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, when execution of both the notice effect and the reel effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the notice effect and the reel effect are performed by operating the stick controller 31A during the operation accepting period of the stick controller 31A. Part of the production period overlaps.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 8-35, this characterizing portion 245SG is provided with a reel effect, a notice effect, and a cut-in effect as effects that can be executed during the variable display. Of these effects, the reel effect is an effect executed by the player operating the stick controller 31A, and no operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A. In addition, the object suggested by the reel effect is the degree of expectation of a big hit or the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or both, and the period during which the effect can be executed is from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display ( If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach out), or from the start of the variable display to reaching reach (if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach).

The advance notice effect is a effect that is executed when the player operates the push button 31B or when the push button 31B operation acceptance period elapses. During the push button 31B operation acceptance period, an image is displayed. An operation prompting image 245SG005H is displayed on the device 5 . In addition, the target suggested by the advance notice effect is only the degree of expectation of a big hit, and the period during which the effect can be executed is from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (if the fluctuation pattern is not reachable), or the start of the variable display to reaching reach (if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach).

The cut-in effect is a effect executed when the player operates the push button 31B or when the push button 31B operation reception period elapses. During the operation reception period of the push button 31B, an image An operation prompting image 245SG005H is displayed on the display device 5 . Further, the target suggested by the cut-in effect is the degree of expectation for big win, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, or both, and the period during which the effect can be executed is after reach.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 245SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 8-36(A) and 8-36(B), the display control unit 123 has a first layer 245SG301, a second layer 245SG302, a third layer 245SG303, and a layer for drawing an image. It has a fourth layer 245SG304, and the images drawn on these first layer 245SG301 to fourth layer 245SG304 can be synthesized and displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

Among these layers, the first layer 245SG301 is the highest layer (top layer), and draws an error notification image 245SG005J as a game progress information display corresponding to the progress of the game and a fourth pattern 245SG005F. It is a layer for The second layer 245SG302 is a layer lower than the first layer 245SG301, and is a layer for drawing a reel effect (reel image 245SG005G). The third layer 245SG303 is a layer lower than the second layer 245SG302, and includes an announcement effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, and push button 31B) and cut-in effects (cut-in images 245SG005w, 245SG005x, 245SG005y, 245SG005 and push button 31B operation prompting image 245SG005H). The fourth layer 245SG304 is a lower layer (bottom layer) than the third layer 245SG303, and is used to display decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. This is a layer for drawing variable displays and reserved displays in the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U.

Therefore, in the characteristic portion 245SG, the image drawn on the third layer 245SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the image drawn on the fourth layer 245SG304. The image drawn on the second layer 245SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the images drawn on the third layer 245SG303 and the fourth layer 245SG304, and is drawn on the first layer 245SG301. The image drawn is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the images drawn on the second layer 245SG302 to the fourth layer 245SG304.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characterizing portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-37 to 8-41. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-37(A) and 8-37(B), when it is decided to execute the reel effect and not to execute the cut-in effect at the start of the variable display, the stick controller 31A is operated. A reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the bottom center of the image display device 5 by the player operating the stick controller 31A during the operation accepting period. Since the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decoration symbols and the reserved display, part of the decoration symbols and the reserved display is hidden by the reel image 245SG005G.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-37(C) to 8-37(H), the variable display results within the reel image 245SG005G are "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "hot", " Symbols such as "Chance" and "Bell" are stopped and displayed, suggesting that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the variable display result will result in a big hit.

In addition, after symbols such as "Cherry", "Watermelon", "7", "Hot", "Chance", "Bell", etc. are stopped and displayed on the reel image 245SG005G, before the end of reach or variable display The display of the reel image 245SG005G on the image display device 5 ends.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 (A) and 8-38 (B), when it is decided to not execute the reel effect and to execute the advance notice effect at the start of the variable display, after the start of the variable display The image display device 5 displays an image of the push button 31B (operation prompting image 245SG005H) for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, the advance notice effects of patterns YE-1 to YE-4 are displayed on the image display device 5. executed in either Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-38(C) to 8-38(F), when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 245SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5. When the image is displayed with the blue effect and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the image 245SG005t of the character B is displayed together with the red effect on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3. In this case, the image 245SG005u of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a golden effect, and when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 as a rainbow. Displayed with color effects.

At this time, the player expects a big hit according to which of the character images 245SG005s, 245SG005t, 245SG005u, and 245SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the notice effect is executed only in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

Note that the operation promotion image 245SG005H, the image 245SG005s of character A, the image 245SG005t of character B, the image 245SG005u of character C, and the group image 245SG005v of characters A to C in the advance notice effect are displayed with priority over the decoration pattern and the pending display. Therefore, part of the decoration pattern and the pending display is hidden by these operation promotion image 245SG005H, character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, and character A to C set image 245SG005v.

On the other hand, the fourth pattern 245SG005F is displayed with priority over the operation promoting image 245SG005H, the image 245SG005s of character A, the image 245SG005t of character B, the image 245SG005u of character C, and the collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C in the advance notice effect. Therefore, the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C whose display area overlaps with the fourth pattern 245SG005F is partially hidden by the fourth pattern 245SG005F (see FIG. 8-38(F)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-39(A) and 8-39(B), when it is decided to execute the reel effect and the advance notice effect at the start of the variable display, the operation of the stick controller 31A is accepted. A reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the bottom center of the image display device 5 by the player operating the stick controller 31A during the period. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39(C), during the variable display in the reel image 245SG005G, an image of the push button 31B ( An operation prompting image 245SG005H) is displayed. As described above, the reel image 245SG005G and the operation prompting image 245SG005H are displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the decorative symbols and the pending display.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, as shown in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-39 (E) 8-39(D) and 8-39(E). example).

In addition, since the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the notice effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C), the notice effect (Fig. In 8-39, the collective image 245SG005v) of the characters A to C is partially hidden by the reel image 245SG005G. Further, as described above, the fourth pattern 245SG005F is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the advance notice effect (collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the CPU 103 detects an error such as an abnormal prize winning or a magnetic error during execution of reel effects or cut-in effects, An error notification image 245SG005J is displayed.

At this time, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and the notice effect (group image 245SG005v of characters A to C). ) and a part of the announcement effect (group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) are hidden by the error notification image 245SG005J.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach γ, after the decorative patterns are displayed in combination with reach as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) to (C), super reach A ready-to-reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight in this characteristic portion 245SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-40(D), when it is time to start executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the image display device 5 displays the image of the push button 31B (operation promoting image 245SG005H). is started, and promotion notification is performed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. When the acceptance period has passed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with a cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-1, the cut-in image 245SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. , the cut-in image 245SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in image 245SG005y is displayed with a gold effect on the image display device 5 when the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. When the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 245SG005z is displayed on the image display device 5 with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 245SG005w, 245SG005x, 245SG005y, and 245SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are, and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and 8-41 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern), super reach γ As a result of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the ally character loses to the enemy character, and it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and 8-41 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect) , as a result of ready-to-reach effect (battle effect result) of super reach-gamma, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character wins over the enemy character, and the variable display ends.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A), 8-41 (D) to 8-41 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection effect variation pattern), it is once notified that the variable display result is lost when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection effect, it is once again reported that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character winning against the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, Variable display ends.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with the reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. Battle production is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. It should be noted that the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach δ may be produced in the same manner as the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach γ. may

As described above, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing at -3, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of line when executed in pattern CI-3. In other words, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved. there is

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-25, as a variation pattern capable of executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect, once it is notified that the variable display result is lost, Super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern to execute revival presentation, PB1-5) and super ready-to-win not to perform revival presentation to inform that the variable display result is a big win by executing revival presentation γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) are provided, and when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the revival performance, the super reach γ jackpot variation that does not execute the revival performance. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. For this reason, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is not displayed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the player. is any one of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to 4 to 6 by executing the resurrection performance and announcing that the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that it is either of the above.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, disadvantageous set values are set to 1 to 3 and advantageous set values are set to 4 to 6, which are set in the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on whether the set value is a disadvantageous set value or an advantageous set value, the decision ratio of the cut-in effect or the notice effect pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value is 1 and the advantageous setting value is 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap each other. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

Further, in the characterizing section 245SG of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect in the present invention is described as a ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effect other than the ready-to-win effect, such as a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop and the re-variable display of the decorative symbols are repeatedly executed, may be used as long as the effect can be executed immediately.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the deviation of the super reach γ When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game is performed. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is wrong, and the higher the setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since the player can expect the setting, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern. shows a form in which the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, the pachinko game Regardless of the setting value set in machine 1, the rate at which the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 may be the same rate. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify a person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and FIG. 8-13 As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big win, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using one big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the ratio of executing the resurrection performance during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit, the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute any reach effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are exemplified in a form that is previously determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect can be changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display result or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-26, as the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so the variations of the super reach effect increase and the super Since the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the reach δ, and the variable display result can make the player pay attention to whether or not the result will be a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during a period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or to the end timing of the variable display) and a ready-to-reach state. A cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect is provided. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the variable display result is a big win and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high expectation of a big win. When executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot. By executing YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when execution of the cut-in effect pattern CI-4 has been determined, whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice effect in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the variable display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the notice effect is set at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). When the variable display result becomes a big win, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big win from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest by preventing this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the form in which the announcement effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a prefetch effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect, so that the variable display result is obtained during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when the variable display result is a big win, the big win type is always the big win C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. In the case of losing, the player can be made to think that even if the player wins a big win, it might have been a big win A or B. can reduce the decrease in

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30, one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is When there is a possibility of losing), when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, when the advance notice performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Since the production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, by executing the advance notice production in pattern YE-3 and YE-4 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not result in a big win, the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 are executed during the same variable display, and thus the variable display result becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations of

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as the setting value for the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3, which is a effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. As a mode for restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when the execution of is made unexecutable in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4), but the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, the advance notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that of pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. The pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 may be executable. In other words, "when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is performed in a mode including the specific effect. If executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted." A mode in which patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed at a lower rate than in YE-2 is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. In the case, if the set value is the same value, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is the cut-in effect in the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state. It is set higher than the rate of execution in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is a high-probability-high base state, cut-in production is performed in the variable display of super reach γ out more than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state. Since the pattern CI-3 is executed more frequently, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state. can improve the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 because the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG of the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is performed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When it is executed, if the game state is a high-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut-in at a higher rate than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state Although a form in which the effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , and when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. If the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is changed to the advance effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, and push By being displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the operation promotion image 245SG005H) of the button 31B, the reel performance becomes easier for the player to visually recognize than the advance notice performance, so that the player stops as a result of the reel performance. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily guessed from the displayed patterns, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 245SG, a pattern that is stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect effect can suggest a setting value set to 1 in the pachinko game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, it may be possible to suggest whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed since the previous activation by the symbol stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effect. In other words, the setting suggestion in the present invention includes a suggestion of a setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and a suggestion that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed. contains both.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, the execution period of the reel effect (setting suggestion effect) and the execution period of the advance notice effect partially overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of these reel effects and the execution period of the advance notice effects may completely coincide.

In addition, in the characteristic part 245SG, the reel effect (setting suggesting effect) is started at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect during the variable display and is finished at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if at least a part of the period during which the reel effect can be executed and the period during which the notice effect can be executed overlap, for example, the reel effect It may be started at a timing later than the start timing of and ended at a timing before the end timing of the advance notice effect. Also, the reel effect may start at a timing after the start timing of the notice effect and end at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect. Also, the reel effect may be started at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect and ended at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect. Also, the reel effect may be started at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect and ended at a timing before the end timing of the notice effect. The reel performance may start at a timing before the announcement performance and end at a timing before the announcement performance.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, the execution period of the reel effect (setting suggestion effect) and the execution period of the advance notice effect partially overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the execution period of the reel effect and the execution period of the advance notice effect may not overlap.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 245SG, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is changed to the advance effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, and push button 31B. Although the form in which the visibility of the reel effect on the image display device 5 is made higher than the notice effect by drawing on a layer higher than the operation prompting image 245SG005H), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel effect is displayed as a relatively larger image than the advance notice effect, the contrast of the reel effect is made higher than the notice effect, the display time of the reel effect is made longer than the notice effect, and the operating speed of the reel effect is changed. The visibility of the reel effect on the image display device 5 may be made higher than the notice effect by setting it later than the notice effect.

In addition, in this characterizing section 245SG, a mode in which the reel effects are executed by operating the stick controller 31A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect may be executed in accordance with the progress of the variable display regardless of whether or not the operation of 31A is executed. In this case, as with the characterizing section 245SG, it is sufficient to decide to stop the "cherry" and "watermelon" symbols at a rate corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Further, in this characteristic portion 245SG, when the stick controller 31A is operated in advance at the start of the variable display, a mode is exemplified for determining whether or not to execute the reel effect and the result of the effect, but the present invention is this. However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the reel effect during the variable display and the effect result based on the operation of the stick controller 31A during the variable display. By doing so, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the reel effect and the effect result when the stick controller 31A is operated each time the variable display is started, so the control load of the effect control CPU 120 is reduced. can.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, a mode is exemplified in which the reel effect can be executed in the period before the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect is a variable display during the ready-to-win effect. In addition to being executed, it may be possible to execute during a period in which variable display is not executed, such as during a jackpot game. Incidentally, when the reel effect can be executed in a period in which the variable display is not executed, the symbols to be stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effect are "cherry and "watermelon", and a "bell" design that does not suggest anything.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the image display device 5 can display an error notification image 245SG005J and a fourth symbol 245SG005F as game progress information display corresponding to the progress of the game. (reel image 245SG005G) are displayed at the same time, the error notification image 245SG005J is preferentially displayed over the reel image 245SG005G. Since the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image 245SG005J can be ensured, and errors caused by obstruction of the display of the error notification image 245SG005J by the reel image 245SG005G can be prevented.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, as the game progress information display, the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth pattern 245SG005F are displayed on the image display device 5 as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As the game progress information display, for example, display other than the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth symbol 245SG005F, such as a display of the number of reservations that can specify the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol. good.

In addition, the image display device 5 can execute variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As shown in 37, when the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed overlapping the decoration symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decoration symbol. As a result, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with higher visibility than the decorative symbols, so that the visibility of the reel image 245SG005G in the symbol display area 5C can be ensured, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the image display device 5 can display pending displays in the first pending memory display area 245SG005D and the second pending memory display area 245SG005U as effect-related images related to effects different from reel effects and advance notice effects. When the effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the reserved display, Since the visibility of the reel image 245SG005G in the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 245SG005U can be ensured, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, the pending display is exemplified as the effect-related image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect-related image may be, for example, a decoration that is always displayed on the image display device 5. may include images for

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, in the reel effect, it is possible to stop and display the symbol "7" for notifying that the variable display result will be a big win as the effect result. In addition to the stop display of symbols such as "cherry" and "watermelon" that suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the stop display of the "7" symbol is also performed. Since the players can be made to pay attention, it is possible to increase the attention to the reel performance and improve the game interest.

In addition, in the reel performance, as a performance result, a "bell" symbol that does not suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and a set value that is set in the pachinko game machine 1 suggest that the set value is a high set value. and a "cherry" symbol indicating that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high set value at a higher rate than the "watermelon" symbol can be stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed as a result of the reel presentation, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the variable display of the characteristic portion 245SG, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 and 8-38, an operation prompting image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. A notice effect and a reel effect in which an operation promotion image is not displayed to prompt the player to operate the stick controller 31A can be executed. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be indicated by the static display. For this reason, the stick controller 31A is not operated by a player who is not interested in suggesting the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the reel effect is not executed, while the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 Since the stick controller 31A is operated by the player who is interested in the suggestion, the reel effect is executed, so the effect matching the taste of the player can be executed.

Further, since the reel effect in this characteristic portion 245SG can be executed only once during the variable display, the player operates the stick controller 31A a plurality of times during one variable display. is executed to prevent the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from being excessively recognized by the player.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 245SG, a mode is exemplified in which reel effects can be executed only once during one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reel effects are executed during one variable display. It may be possible to execute a spinning reel effect. In addition, when it is possible to execute the reel effect multiple times during the variable display of 1, the pachinko game can be performed by setting the rate at which the symbols of "cherry" and "watermelon" are stop-displayed to be lower than that of the characteristic portion 245SG. It may be possible to prevent the setting value set in the machine 1 from being excessively recognized by the player.

Further, in this characteristic portion 245SG, the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by operating the push button 31B. In other words, the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed with the detection of the action of the player by the different action detection means as a trigger. It is possible to reliably avoid being caught, and improve the amusement of the game. Furthermore, since the player can operate the stick controller 31A at any desired timing within the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A to execute the reel effect, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 245SG, the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by operating the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with motion detection means other than the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B such as a touch sensor and a motion sensor, and these touch sensors and motion sensors detect the actions of the player (to a specific location of the pachinko gaming machine 1). player's proximity/contact, player's gesture, etc.) may be used to execute the reel effect or the advance notice effect.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a hitting ball operation handle 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the hitting ball shooting device as a game operation detection means. A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B capable of detecting a player's operation are provided as operation detection means. Therefore, the player operates the ball hitting operation handle 30 to proceed with the game, operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to execute reel effects and notice effects, can be distinguished.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-31(A), the execution period of the reel effect including the operation reception period of the stick controller 31A is set so that the reel effect can be executed even during the variable display of shortened non-reach out. Shortened non-reach is set to 3 seconds to 3.5 seconds shorter than the special figure fluctuation time 3.75 seconds. Therefore, even when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the variable display of shortened non-reach out, the reel performance can be executed. can be done.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 245SG, a form in which the reel performance can be executed during the variable display of shortened non-reach out is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel performance is performed by shortening non-reach out. It may be made executable only during the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reel effect for a sufficient period of time for the player to recognize it, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. (PA2-4 and PB1-4), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (A) to 8-42 (E) as a modification 245SG-1, when executing variable display with a variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing a resurrection effect , the cut-in effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, any one of 4 to 6 is set to the pachinko game machine 1 as the set value. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game due to the execution of a resurrection performance and the notification that the result of variable display is a big hit despite the player's recognition that it is set.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed with the super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the form in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and modification 245SG-2 is shown in FIG. As shown in -43 (A) to FIG. 8-43 (D), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival production, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival production is displayed. The ratio of performing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of performing the variable display in the variation pattern. By doing so, for example, the player puts more importance on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not than whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. In the case where it is, after the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is notified of the loss, the resurrection effect is further executed and the result of the variable display is the big hit. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is notified, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5 ), the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3. As shown in 8-44 (A) to FIG. 8-44 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a super reach γ jackpot for executing a resurrection effect. When the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3 In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variable display result is the jackpot, and is set in the pachinko game machine 1. After it is determined that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and it is once notified that the variable display result is lost during the reach performance of super reach γ during the variable display, the resurrection performance is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be announced as a big win, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

That is, in the characteristic part 245SG, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the variable display result is lost. By confirming that the value is one of 4 to 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and further, the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to promote the continuation of the game against.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is a deviation variation pattern When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be a pattern CI-1 or CI-2, which is a pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is performed. exemplifies a form in which the advance notice effect can be executed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the execution in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is determined. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. and when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which super reach γ is lost, it is decided to execute the pattern CI-3, which is a production pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, as a cut-in production. In the case where the cut-in effect is a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the forewarning effect is performed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 is determined to be executed. It may be executable. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 By executing the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than , it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be wrong. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game will be a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. And when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is the high probability high base state, if the set value is the same value, the game state is low Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than the probability low base state or the low probability high base state has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modification As shown in FIG. 8-46 as 245SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4). is executed, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state The in effect may be made executable in pattern CI-3.

By doing so, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state During the reach production of super reach γ Since the cut-in effect is likely to be executed in the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, variable display of 1000 times) in the low-probability-low base state. When the willingness to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. is notified to the player, the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 245SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same value, a cut-in effect will be performed at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Although the pattern CI-3 exemplifies a form that can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 245SG-6, as shown in FIG. When the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state , the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high probability high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, so the high probability Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state in which the variable display result is less likely to result in a big hit than the high base state, the game interest in these low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of super reach γ and super reach δ was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-48 (A) and 8-48 (B) as a modification 245SG-7, during the reach production of super reach γ and super reach δ, instead of cut-in production, pachinko game A set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be made executable. In addition, in the case where the setting value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period (for example, , the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the ready state), the above-mentioned notice effect can be executed, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggesting effect may differ according to the effect pattern of the notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, the set value is set at a higher rate than when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It suffices if the suggestive effect can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which production pattern the announcement effect is executed, and when the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting value suggesting performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, the player can be prevented from overlooking the set value suggesting performance.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-39, reel effects (reel image 245SG005G) and advance notice effects (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u and group image 245SG005v) of characters A to C are executed, the reel effect is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the advance notice effect. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) to 8-49(E) as a modification 245SG-8, for example, both the reel effect and the advance notice effect are displayed during the variable display. When executed, a reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and a notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, character A to C group image 245SG005v) may be displayed above the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the reel effect, that is, the reel effect and the advance notice effect may be displayed in different display areas of the image display device 5 .

By doing so, the visibility of the images of both the reel effect and the notice effect is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of one of the reel effect and the notice effect from deteriorating.

In this modified example 245SG-8, by displaying the reel effect and the advance notice effect in different display areas of the image display device 5, the effect of one of the reel effect and the notice effect is reduced. Although the form to prevent is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display means different from the image display device 5, and both the reel effect and the advance notice effect are displayed during the variable display. is executed, the reel effect is displayed on one of the image display device 5 and the image display means, and the notice effect is displayed on the other, thereby ensuring the visibility of the images of both the reel effect and the notice effect. , it may be possible to prevent the effect of one of the reel effect and the notice effect from being lowered.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 245SG of the above-described embodiment, reel effects (reel image 245SG005G) and advance notice effects (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, image 245SG005u of character C, and 245SG005v) are executed, the reel effect is prioritized over the notice effect regardless of the effect pattern of the notice effect (the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the notice effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the reel effect and the notice effect are executed during the variable display, the image display device 5 displays the notice effect as the notice effect. Whether or not the reel effect is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the advance notice effect may be changed according to the image to be displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-50(A) to 8-50(E) as a modified example 245SG-9, an image of a character A with a low degree of expectation for a big hit as a reel effect and a notice effect during variable display. When it is decided to display 245SG005s (pattern YE-1), the reel effect is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the notice effect, and the reel effect and the notice effect are displayed during the variable display. (pattern YE-4) is determined to display a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C with high expectations for a big hit as shown in FIG. 8-49 as a modification 245SG-8. The display areas of the reel performance and the advance notice performance in the device 5 are made different.

By doing so, it is possible to secure the visibility of the reel performance, and an image with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) is displayed on the image display device 5 as an advance notice performance. In this case, since the visibility of the advance notice effect can be ensured in addition to the reel effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the fact that the stop pattern displayed as the reel effect and the variable display result have a high ratio of winning big. It is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the above-described embodiment, when the reel effect is executed, a mode is provided in which the variable display result is a big hit by stop-displaying the "7" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of symbols capable of informing that the variable display result is a big hit may be provided as the effect result of the reel effect.

In such a case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-51 (A) to 8-51 (D) as a modification 245SG-10, the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit A (non-probable variable In the case of a jackpot), while the white '7' symbol can be stopped and displayed as a result of reel performance, the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a jackpot B or a jackpot C (probable variable jackpot). In this case, a black "7" symbol may be stop-displayed as a result of the reel effect. By doing so, when the "7" symbol for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit as the effect result of the reel effect is stopped and displayed, the game is played in the display mode of the stop-displayed "7" symbol. Since it is possible to attract the attention of the player, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the image of the character is displayed on the image display device 5 as the notice effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is as follows. A group effect in which a plurality of characters traverses the display area of the image display device 5, etc., which is different from the characteristic portion 245SG, may be executed. In particular, when the group effect can be executed as the advance notice effect, the display of the image display device 5 as the group effect is shown in FIGS. A reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) may be displayed superimposed on a character crossing the area leftward. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reel effect from being lowered by the character crossing the display area of the image display device 5 in the left direction.

Further, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by operating the push button 31B. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is triggered by the detection of the action of the player by the means, the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed triggered by the detection of the operation of Incidentally, when the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed in response to detection of the action of the player by the same action detection means as described above, during the variable display of 1, as shown in the characteristic portion 245SG, Instead of partly overlapping the effect executable period of the reel effect and the effect executable period of the advance notice effect (see FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34), as shown in FIG. In addition, during one variable display, the effect executable period of the reel effect and the effect executable period of the advance notice effect may not overlap at all. By doing so, it is possible to avoid execution of a performance that the player does not desire, out of the reel performance and the advance notice performance, by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the start timing of the reel effect and the start timing of the advance notice effect are different has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel effect is executed. By setting the period for accepting the operation of the stick controller 31A for the purpose and the period for accepting the operation of the push button 31B for executing the notice effect to be the same period, the reel effect and the notice effect may be executed from the same timing.

In addition, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the effect control CPU 120 can determine whether or not to execute the reel effect at the start of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reel effect at the start of the variable display may be changeable by the player's operation. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-54 (A) and 8-54 (B) as a modification 245SG-13, the state where the game is not executed (variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is executed When the game state is not the big win game state or the small win game state), when the player operates the push button 31B, the effect mode change screen is displayed on the image display device 5. It is sufficient that the effect mode can be selected (changed) from the first effect mode and the second effect mode by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A while the effect mode change screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-54 (C), when the first effect mode is selected, the reel effect is executed at the start of the variable display at a higher rate than when the second effect mode is selected. can be determined.

In addition, in this modification 245SG-13, a first effect mode and a second effect mode with different reel effect execution ratios are provided, and the player can select between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (effect mode can be changed), but the present invention is not limited to this. The mode may be selectable.

Furthermore, in the modification 245SG-13, the player can change the effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a performance mode change switch for changing the performance mode at a possible position, the staff of the game parlor can change the performance mode, while the player cannot change the performance mode. good. Furthermore, whether or not the player can change the presentation mode, and whether or not the player can change the presentation mode, can be set by an employee of the game arcade or the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 245SG of the above embodiment, an example is given of a mode in which any cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect during execution of the reach effect of super reach γ. It is not limited to this, and any cut-in image (for example, , cut-in image 245SG005y) may be displayed.

Further, in this way, when one of the cut-in images can be displayed in a display area different from the reel effect (245SG005G) in the image display device 5, a modified example 245SG-14 is shown in FIG. 8-55(A). 8-55 (D), a plurality of cut-in images suggesting set values as cut-in effects (for example, cut-in image 245SG005y of pattern CI-3 and cut-in image of new pattern CI-5 245SG005r) can be displayed, and depending on which cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-55 (E), if any value from 1 to 3 is set as the setting value in the pachinko machine 1, pattern CI-3 (cut-in image 245SG005y display) is determined at a higher rate than pattern CI-5 (display of cut-in image 245SG005r), and if any value from 4 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko machine 1, cut The pattern CI-5 (display of the cut-in image 245SG005r) should be determined as the in effect at a higher rate than the pattern CI-3 (display of the cut-in image 245SG005y).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 245SG, since the cut-in effect can be executed only during the reach effect of super reach γ, the ratio (execution frequency) at which the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-5 is executed as the cut-in effect can be made different from the rate at which symbols of "cherry" and "watermelon" are stop-displayed as the effect result of the reel effect. As described above, the ratio of the cut-in effects to be executed in patterns CI-3 and CI-5 is different from the ratio of the symbols "cherry" and "watermelon" to be stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effects. The cut-in effect and the reel effect make it easy for the player to guess the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 245SG-14, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-5, and the rate at which the symbol "cherry" or "watermelon" is stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when "6" is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-3. The ratio of execution in CI-5 and the ratio of stop-display of symbols of "cherry" and "watermelon" as the effect result of the reel effect may be different.

By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to guess the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by the cut-in effect and the reel effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to other games such as slot machines. may be applied to the machine.

In addition, although a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications are disclosed in the present specification, the game machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more characteristic portions and modifications from these plurality of characteristic portions and modifications. You may

(Description of Invention 245SG)
This case includes invention 245SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, a setting suggesting effect is displayed at the time of change by displaying characters such as giraffes, elephants, and lions that suggest the set values. (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that effects other than setting suggesting effects are not taken into consideration, and the setting suggesting effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest. In order to solve such problems, Invention 245SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1 is
Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
A specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A, an image 245SG005t of character B, an image 245SG005u of character C, and a collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C) suggesting the control to the advantageous state is displayed on the display means. and a setting suggesting effect of displaying on the display means a setting suggesting image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G in which a pattern of "cherry" or "watermelon" is stopped and displayed) which is different from the specific image and is related to setting suggesting. (For example, a reel effect) and effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display);
with
When the advance notice effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the setting suggesting image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the specific image (for example, FIG. 8-39 (E ), when the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion image is easier to visually recognize than the specific image, it is easier for the player to guess the setting suggestion, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The display means is capable of displaying game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F and the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game,
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example, 8-39(F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, misrecognition of the game progress information display can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in specific display areas of the display means (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R),
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example, 8-39(B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G has priority over the decoration symbol in the symbol display area 5C. (the part displayed by
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the specific display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means includes an effect-related image display area (for example, a first pending storage display area 245SG005D and a second has a reserved memory display area 245SG005U),
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the effect related image display area, the setting suggestion image has higher visibility than the effect related image displayed in the effect related image display area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the first reserved memory display area The part displayed with priority over 245SG005D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the effect-related image display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means selects, as the specific images, a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low) and a second specific image (for example, a character A that indicates that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high). ~C collective image 245SG005v) can be displayed on the display means,
When the first specific image and the setting suggesting image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the first specific image (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-50(D), when the image display device 5 simultaneously displays the reel image 245SG005G and the image 245SG005s of the character A, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005s of the character A. part),
When the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed simultaneously on the display means, the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8- 50(E), when the image display device 5 simultaneously displays the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. and display a set image 245SG005v of characters A to C on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggesting image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the visibility of the second specific image can also be ensured. Both presentations can improve amusement in the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect execution means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means in the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), reel effect In the part where the "7" symbol indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit can be stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
As the advantageous states, a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B or jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. and
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the second advantageous state as the special setting suggesting image on the display means (for example, as modification 245SG-10, FIGS. 8-51(C) and As shown in FIG. 8-51(D), when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win A, white "7" symbols can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect, and the variable display result is a big win. and when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C, the part where black “7” symbols can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The effect executing means includes a non-suggestive image (for example, a "bell" pattern) that does not serve as the setting suggestion, and a first setting suggesting image (for example, a "watermelon" pattern) and the first setting suggesting image as the setting suggesting image. and a second setting suggesting image (for example, a "cherry" pattern) that suggests that a setting value more advantageous to the player than is set is displayed.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of image displayed in the setting suggesting effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The production executing means is
As the advance notice effect, the specific image is in a predetermined motion state (for example, as shown in FIG. A group effect that traverses from the direction to the left) can be executed,
The setting suggestion image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. part where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from deteriorating due to the specific image being in a predetermined operating state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player,
The production executing means is
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion that displays an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)) can be executed,
As the notice effect, the specific image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. , the image display device 5 displays the operation promotion image 245SG005H, and then the player operates the push button 31B to display the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the characters A to C. The part where any of the collective images 245SG005v is displayed),
As the setting suggesting effect, the setting suggesting image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detecting means without execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 , the reel effects are such that the operation promotion image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to display "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "" on the reel images 245SG005G. The part where one of the patterns of "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" is displayed stopped)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification effect, so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the player who is not interested in the suggestion regarding the setting suggestion. On the other hand, since the player who is interested in the setting suggestion can execute the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the effect that matches the player's taste.

(Description of Invention 246SG)
In addition, this case includes invention 246SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, a setting suggesting effect is displayed at the time of change by displaying characters such as giraffes, elephants, and lions that suggest the set values. (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that effects other than setting suggesting effects are not taken into consideration, and the setting suggesting effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest. In order to solve such problems, Invention 246SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
A specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A, an image 245SG005t of character B, an image 245SG005u of character C, and a collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C) suggesting the control to the advantageous state is displayed on the display means. An advance notice effect and a setting suggestion of displaying a setting suggestion image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G that stops and displays a pattern of "cherry" or "watermelon") which is an image different from the specific image and is related to the setting suggestion on the display means. Effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display) that can execute the effect,
with
When the advance notice effect and the setting suggesting effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, as modification 245SG-8 shown in FIG. 8- 49, when the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and the character A is displayed. The part where the collective image 245SG005v of ~C is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visual recognition of both the specific image and the setting suggesting image is ensured, it is possible to prevent the effect of either the advance notice effect or the setting suggesting effect from being lowered. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The display means is capable of displaying game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F and the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game,
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example, 8-39(F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, misrecognition of the game progress information display can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in specific display areas of the display means (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R),
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example, 8-39(B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G has priority over the decoration symbol in the symbol display area 5C. (the part displayed by
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the specific display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means includes an effect-related image display area (for example, a first pending storage display area 245SG005D and a second has a reserved memory display area 245SG005U),
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the effect related image display area, the setting suggestion image has higher visibility than the effect related image displayed in the effect related image display area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping the first reserved memory display area 245SG005D, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the first reserved memory display area The part displayed with priority over 245SG005D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the setting suggesting image in the effect-related image display area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The effect executing means selects, as the specific images, a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of character A indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low) and a second specific image (for example, a character A that indicates that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high). ~C collective image 245SG005v) can be displayed on the display means,
When the first specific image and the setting suggesting image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggesting image is displayed with higher visibility than the first specific image (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-50(D), when the image display device 5 simultaneously displays the reel image 245SG005G and the image 245SG005s of the character A, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005s of the character A. part),
When the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed simultaneously on the display means, the second specific image and the setting suggesting image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8- 50(E), when the image display device 5 simultaneously displays the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. and display a set image 245SG005v of characters A to C on the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggesting image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the visibility of the second specific image can also be ensured. Both presentations can improve amusement in the game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The effect execution means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means in the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), reel effect In the part where the "7" symbol indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit can be stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggesting image corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, a big win B or a big win C game state) as the special setting suggesting image on the display means (for example, a deformation As shown in FIGS. 8-51(C) and 8-51(D) as an example 245SG-10, when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win A, the reel effect is white "7". Symbols can be stopped and displayed, and when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win B or a big win C, black "7" symbols can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further increase the attention to the setting suggesting effect, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The effect executing means includes a non-suggestive image (for example, a "bell" pattern) that does not serve as the setting suggestion, and a first setting suggesting image (for example, a "watermelon" pattern) and the first setting suggesting image as the setting suggesting image. and a second setting suggesting image (for example, a "cherry" pattern) that suggests that a setting value more advantageous to the player than is set is displayed.
According to this feature, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of image displayed in the setting suggesting effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The production executing means is
As the advance notice effect, the specific image is in a predetermined motion state (for example, as shown in FIG. A group effect that traverses from the direction to the left) can be executed,
The setting suggestion image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. part where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from deteriorating due to the specific image being in a predetermined operating state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
Equipped with motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player,
The production executing means is
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion that displays an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)) can be executed,
As the notice effect, the specific image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. , the image display device 5 displays the operation promotion image 245SG005H, and then the player operates the push button 31B to display the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the characters A to C. The part where any of the collective images 245SG005v is displayed),
As the setting suggesting effect, the setting suggesting image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined action by the action detecting means without execution of the action promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 , the reel effects are such that the operation promotion image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to display "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "" on the reel images 245SG005G. The part where one of the patterns of "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" is displayed stopped)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification effect, so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion, Since the setting suggestion performance can be executed for the player who is interested in the setting suggestion, the performance matching the player's taste can be executed.

(Description of Invention 257SG)
In addition, this case includes invention 257SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine capable of setting a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player, a setting suggesting effect is displayed at the time of change by displaying characters such as giraffes, elephants, and lions that suggest the set values. (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that effects other than setting suggesting effects are not taken into consideration, and the setting suggesting effects may not sufficiently improve the game interest. In order to solve such problems, Invention 257SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1 is
Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5);
action detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, and ball hitting operation handle 30) capable of detecting a predetermined action of the player;
An action-promoting notification effect prompting execution of the predetermined action (for example, a portion displaying an operation-promoting image 245SG005H on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38(B)), and the predetermined action by the action detection means a specific effect for displaying a specific image on the display means based on the detection of;
with
The specific effects include a first specific effect (e.g., advance notice effect) accompanied by execution of the action promotion notification effect, and a second specific effect (e.g., reel effect) not accompanied by execution of the action promotion notification effect,
The specific image displayed in the second specific effect includes a setting suggestion image that makes a suggestion related to the setting suggestion (for example, in the reel effect, the reel image 245SG005G has a pattern of "cherry" or "watermelon"). The part that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by stopping the display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second specific effect in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the action promotion notification effect, so that the second specific effect is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion. On the other hand, since the player who is interested in the suggestion of setting can execute the second specific effect, it is possible to execute the effect matching the taste of the player.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time, the specific image displayed in the second specific effect is the Displayed so as to have higher visibility than the specific image displayed in the first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (E), the reel image 245SG005G and the character A When the group image 245SG005v of ~C is displayed at the same time, the part where the reel is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of characters A to C)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific image displayed in the second specific effect is easier to visually recognize than the specific image displayed in the first specific effect, it becomes easier for the player to speculate about setting suggestion, and the game is more interesting. can improve.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time, the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time. 2. The specific image displayed in the specific effect is displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. When the group image 245SG005v of C is displayed at the same time, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed in the upper part of the image display device 5. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to ensure the visibility of both the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect. Since it is possible to prevent the performance effect of one of the performances from deteriorating, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect execution means executes the second specific effect in an execution period different from the execution period of the first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-53 as modification 245SG-12, reel effect and notice The part where the performance is executed in a different period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to avoid the erroneous execution of the specific effect that the player does not want out of the first specific effect and the second specific effect by the player's predetermined action, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The motion detection means includes first motion detection means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting the predetermined motion, and second motion detection capable of detecting the predetermined motion and different from the first motion detection means. means (e.g., stick controller 31A),
The effect execution means can execute the first specific effect based on detection of the predetermined motion by the first motion detection means, and the second specific effect based on detection of the predetermined motion by the second motion detection means. A specific effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a notice effect based on the operation of the push button 31B, and the stick controller 31A The part that can execute reel effects based on the operation)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the motion detection means for detecting the predetermined motion of the player is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the player does not want the first specific effect and the second specific effect. To surely avoid the erroneous execution of a specific performance and improve amusement in a game.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The action detection means includes game operation detection means (for example, the batting operation handle 30) capable of detecting an operation based on the progress of the game, and effect operation detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A and a push control) capable of detecting an operation based on the effect. button 31B) and
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects that are executed based on the detection of the predetermined action of the player by the effect operation detection means (for example, the reel effect and the advance notice effect are , a portion that is an effect executed based on the operation of the stick controller and roller 31A or the push button 31B by the player)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it can be distinguished from actions related to the progress of the game.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A variable display can be executed, and a normal variable display (for example, non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variable display) whose variable display period is a predetermined period, and a shortened variable display whose variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period ( For example, a variable display means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) capable of executing a shortened non-reach variable display),
Determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the second specific effect when the predetermined action is detected by the action detection means each time the variable display is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 8- 20) for executing reel effect determination processing;
with
The effect period of the second specific effect is a period corresponding to the variable display period of the shortened variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. The period is the part shorter than the non-reach special figure fluctuation time)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the action detection means detects the predetermined action of the player during the shortened variable display, the second specific effect can be executed. It is possible to increase the execution ratio of production.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
Execution frequency change means is provided so that the player can change the execution frequency of the second specific effect by the effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the mode can be selected between the first production mode and the second production mode in which the execution determination ratio of the reel production is different)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player can adjust the execution frequency of the second specific effect to a desired frequency, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect that is different from the second specific effect and that suggests the setting in a display area different from the display area in which the setting suggesting image is displayed on the display means. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-55 as a modification 245SG-14, a cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-5 in the upper part of the image display device 5),
At least one of the reliability and the execution frequency of the suggestive effect is different from the second specific effect (for example, the rate at which pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-5 is executed as a cut-in effect is used as the effect result of the reel effect. The part where the "cherry" and "watermelon" patterns are different from the percentage of stopped display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the suggestion effect and the second specific effect make it easier for the player to guess the setting suggestion, so that the game interest can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. ), the game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1), which is capable of displaying an image (for example, image display device 5), and is controlled to the advantageous state a notice effect of displaying on the display means a specific image suggesting that the and a setting suggestion effect of displaying on the display means a setting suggestion image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G that stops displaying symbols of "cherry" or "watermelon") related to the setting suggestion, which is an image different from the setting suggestion effect. Execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes effect processing during variable display), and when the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the The setting suggestion image is displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 as a modification 245SG-8, the reel image 245SG005G and the set image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5. When displayed, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, the collective image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed in the upper part of the image display device 5), and a character image is added. A moving image effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a moving image effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying the moving image, and data related to the moving image A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing, a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images, and display of moving images using the data in the first storage area. Controlling moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.); 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, set by text display setting information). The character image control means controls the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. and can be changed (see, eg, FIG. 11-7).

According to such a configuration, since the visual recognition of both the specific image and the setting suggesting image is ensured, the effect of either the advance notice effect or the setting suggesting effect is reduced. can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved. Appropriate display control is also possible.

In addition to the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion image, the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of effect mode of the moving image effect. For example, by selecting the effect mode of the moving image effect and the character image in the moving image effect by lottery or the like from a plurality of types, and by varying the selection ratio of each effect mode and each character image according to the set setting value Alternatively, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more likely it is that a moving image effect using a specific type of effect mode or a specific type of character image will be performed. By doing so, the types of performance modes of the moving image performance are enriched, and the player can be given the pleasure of guessing the set value by the performance mode of the moving image performance and the character image, thereby improving the game interest. be able to.
Further, if setting values are suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements, namely, a setting suggestion effect by a setting suggestion image and a type of effect mode of a moving image effect), the player can be prompted by a plurality of elements. If an advantageous set value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the set value is advantageous to the player, and if a certain element does not suggest an advantageous set value to the player. However, if an advantageous set value is suggested by another element, the player can continue to expect that the set value is advantageous to the player, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in the game and enabling appropriate display control, a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) and having a character image added thereto. A moving image effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a moving image effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, etc.) for displaying the moving image, and data related to the moving image A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing, a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images, and display of moving images using the data in the first storage area. Controlling moving image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.); 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, set by text display setting information) display style, etc.), and the character image control means controls, in the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component. can be changed (see, eg, FIG. 11-7). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right hitting lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low probability high base state or a big hit game state as a time saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

9-1(A) and 9-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (eg, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 9-2 to 9-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 9-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 9-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 9-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of big hit determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set to a range of 32767 to 33094 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value range from 1020 to 1237 is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, determination included within a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit determination value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 9-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of winning a big hit, making it easier to determine a specific type of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 9-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame opened (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the temporary set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. This is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being checked. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform the corresponding processing (step S10A), and terminate the processing within the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) to FXXX) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is either a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic portion 60AK, the number-of-times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes a notice performance for notifying that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state, a value notification performance for notifying whether or not the variable probability state will be controlled after the jackpot game state is ended, and a pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in is included as an executable effect.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decorative pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative patterns, and is a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as the display result of the display. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable pattern and variable display are "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability ( jackpot)" should be included. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is collectively called "big hit".

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. If the variable display content is "Reach (Loss)", if the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Loss)", the "Normal" variation pattern will be used to create a reach effect, and the variable display content will be "Super Reach ( In the case of "losing)", a reach effect is executed according to the "super" variation pattern. When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', and the jackpot type corresponds to ``non-probability variation'', and the game state after the end of the big win game state is shortened. state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the variable probability state corresponding to the "variable probability" of the jackpot type. Become. When the game state is a probability variable state, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and by being easily controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop pattern is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decorative patterns. be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the determination is performed. Of the decorative symbols, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Of the symbols, the right finalized decoration symbol to be stop-displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124, etc., and referring to the prepared left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, determination is performed. Among the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)". are determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a big hit fixed pattern prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and that control to the variable probability state is made, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be recognizably informed that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the operation production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 60AKS014). Also, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased (digested), and other pending numbers "2" to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability-high base state, the effect permission condition may be satisfied.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is "losing", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B. According to the execution ratio of such a reach production, among the reach productions of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach production of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach production of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the expectation of a big hit increases.

If the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is to be executed, for example, by referring to an operation effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the operation effect execution. and the number of times of execution in the case of execution are determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, the presence or absence and the number of operation effects are set to "no execution" in which no operation effect is executed, or "executed 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The setting suggestion count indicates the number of operation effects executed as the setting suggestion effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. do it. Numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be zero. When the jackpot type is "variable probability", it depends on whether the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is "five times" or "ten times" is ten times. Therefore, the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the suggested setting pattern, and for each execution of the operation presentation. Any setting suggestion pattern may be determined among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value reporting is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as value notification effects among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value notification, the number of times of value notification is determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value notification, which is stored in advance and prepared in ROM 121. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the value is calculated at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "5 times" or "10 times". The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of value notification patterns based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' for each execution number of operation effects. It should be done.

When it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), or when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of times of notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. The notice effect pattern is determined by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern. Any one of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 10-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The content of the reach performance is determined corresponding to the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". B (losing)" should be included. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", SP ready-to-win A ready-to-win effect is executed as a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is five times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "loss". or "executed 10 times" is determined to be 10 times. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-3, when the reach effect of SP reach B is executed, the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-win B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance of SP to-win A, is increased. It effectively raises people's expectations. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 10-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determination in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 10-4(A) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "five times execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 10-4(B) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variation'' when not controlled to the probability variation state and ``probability variation'' when controlled to the probability variation state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state. Advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both cases of “5 times execution” and “10 times execution”, if the jackpot type is “non-probability variation”, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100. Suggestion production is not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 70/100. 30/100. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, and the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100. , the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 3 is 25/100, and the determination rate of setting the suggested number of times to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that are not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion production at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" In the case of "probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big win game state. In addition, only in the case of "probable variation", which is the most advantageous jackpot type among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed. become viable. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, within a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate. In the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type "unprobability variable" with a low advantage, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as the setting suggestive performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "unprobable variation" of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation production that becomes the setting suggestion production can be executed at a low rate. may

FIG. 10-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are defined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the setting value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the set value is high setting (large value) and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high setting, high degree of expectation", and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of the suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 10-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 10-6(A) shows an example of determination in the case of the final operation effect in a plurality of operation effects. Figure 10-6 (B1) and Figure 10-6 (B2) show an example of determination in the case of an operation effect other than the final one in a plurality of operation effects, and Figure 10-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern. FIG. 10-6 (B2) is an example of determination when 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 10-6 (B2) is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns, which are usage patterns, are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100. It is impossible to decide. Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5, which suggests that the setting value is the highest in the player's advantage, is the final operation effect. , and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final time. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing at which setting suggestion effects can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-6, when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for the operation effects other than the final one, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the setting value, and the determination is disabled. . Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as one of the operation effects, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same mode. prevent it from being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate within a range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed. becomes executable.

On the other hand, in the case where the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set as a limit. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed in the range where it is executed as the setting suggestion effect other than the final episode. Restrictions are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation effect that is a setting-suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting-suggestion effect by the setting-suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined rate within the range in which it is executed as one setting-suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it cannot be executed in the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect multiple times. When an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, the range of setting suggestion effects by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 is performed in the same manner. While it may be executed, within the range of the setting suggestion rendering by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that it is not executed in the same manner.

FIG. 10-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 10-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. At step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of value notifications is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "executed 5 times", and is 0 if the number of times the operation effect is executed is "executed 10 times". to 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined ratio. More specifically, in the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 55/100. 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 15/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, the set value can be suggested by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range in which the operation effect as the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect as the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that cannot be done. In addition, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to what can be done with

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of “five times execution”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the set suggestion number is 0, the determination ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio of 2 times of value notification is 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 25/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the operation effect such as the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect is not executed, and after the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display is "big hit". ” can be provided. Therefore, during the execution of the variable display, even if the number of times of execution of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit". is left, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation presentation.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-7, it is possible to determine the number of value notification times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the cases of "five times execution" and "ten times execution". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect is increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "executed 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times to values other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestions to 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to be 1 other than 0 is higher than the ratio of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. expensive. In the case of "executed 10 times", even if the set suggestion number is 0, the rate of the value notification number being determined to be other than 0 is higher than the rate of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing. . With such a setting, in the case of "execution of 10 times", in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is larger than that of "execution of 5 times", the rate at which the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. increase the rate of In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value notification times that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notification is possible. What is necessary is just to make it possible to raise the ratio with which production|presentation is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "executed 5 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect to be executed is high. In the case of "executed 10 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of the operation effects is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the setting suggesting effect and the value notification effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be determined that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

When it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set so as to come later than the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the advance notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win production period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be after the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify during a predetermined period during execution of the variable display that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period in step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set after the jackpot notification period, or may be set to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns (step 60AKS054), and then the process during variable display ends.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the design confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the design confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a predetermined time is set as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 10-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 10-9(A) shows the execution period and execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the form of the variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 10-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings of operation-related effects including number-of-times notification effects and operation effects. When the variable display is started at the timing T0, it becomes the number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect process during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect, which is the notice effect, can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect process during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each time advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects, such as the first notice, the second notice, etc., is executed in order. . The notice effect period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. part of the period may be included. By executing the operation effect as the notice effect during the notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is changed to "big hit" based on the detection of the action of the player such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example. It becomes possible to execute a performance that foretells what will happen.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the determined decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process enables execution of the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a value notification effect is executed multiple times, each value notification effect included in the value notification effect of multiple times, such as the first notification, the second notification, etc., is executed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, based on detection of the action of the player, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variable state is set. It becomes possible to execute an effect for informing whether or not to be controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times, each setting suggestion effect included in the setting suggestion effect such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, . . . executed. By executing the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect period, based on the detection of the player's action such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 It becomes possible to execute a production that makes a suggestion. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends, the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect is executed as a value notification effect for informing whether or not the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit notification is performed at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the set suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Feasibly determined. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, A predetermined period elapses at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with the low advantage is performed when the notification of the control to the jackpot game state with the high advantage is performed by the value notification performance. In a later specific period, it becomes possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode.

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it is difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, it is possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. As expected from the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, the performance can be diversified and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, according to being controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". Only when the value notification performance is controlled to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. Become.

In general, it is difficult to further raise the player's expectation after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested. , even after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to diversify the performance and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode.

FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11 show examples of execution of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be "10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of setting suggestions are both determined to be two. Therefore, after the operation performance serving as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 10-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when the big win notification is executed by the big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decoration pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variable state. , given to the player.

FIG. 10-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 10-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 10-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the big hit type is "probability variable" is not notified, so that the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state A failure notification effect that gives an impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of times of execution of the operation effect.

FIG. 10-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 10-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "variable probability" is performed, so that the variable probability state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect for notifying that it is controlled is executed. In addition, as decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal design that indicates the number "6" is a probability variation design that indicates the number "7". changed and displayed. When the decoration pattern of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols is displayed, the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that it is controlled to the variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 10-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 10-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image indicating the push button 31B together with the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 10-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be displayed. , are recognizable by the player.

FIG. 10-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player can press the push button 31B. action is prompted. FIG. 10-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 10-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 10-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying decoration symbols of a probability variable jackpot combination, which is a fixed decoration symbol, corresponding to the end of the variable display. After that, based on the display result of the variable display being "big hit", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 10-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", the setting suggestion production is higher than when the jackpot type is "probability variation" may be determined feasibly. In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-4, the setting suggestion number may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "probability variation", the jackpot type is a lower advantage than the case of "probability variation" In the case of a certain "non-probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, only when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", an operation presentation that is a setting suggestion performance may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, the jackpot types may be controllable to jackpot game states with different numbers of rounds instead of the jackpot game states with "non-probability variable" or "probability variable". For example, "4R" with 4 rounds, "6R" with 6 rounds, "8R" with 8 rounds, and "10R" with 10 rounds. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Also in such a case, among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage, there is a notification that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage by the value notification effect. When it is performed, the set suggestive performance is set as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the jackpot game state with a low advantage is performed. Make it executable. In addition, in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, the value notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled to the highest degree of advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage. In this case, the set suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is performed. may Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the content of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "executed 5 times", which is 5 times, or the case of "executed 10 times", which is 10 times. It is acceptable if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of executions of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small, and the setting suggestion presentation may be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of operation effects is large, it is possible to set the setting suggestion number of times that is not determined when the number of times of execution of operation effects is small, or to increase the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects. may

Instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 10-6, for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns, a restriction may be provided so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not it is the final operation effect, and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at the common determination ratio, and then the predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is established, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting the execution of the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the set value is 6 may be easily executed. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6 may be difficult to execute. .

A setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after being executed once. . For example, in a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the cancellation condition is not established, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by. When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value has a high advantage for the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of notice effect patterns, there are notice effect patterns with different decision ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko game machine 1, and notice effect patterns that can be determined only when the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 are specific values. may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a notice performance pattern that notifies a message of "reliability 66%", or the decision ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. Thus, it is sufficient that the determined values in the announcement effect pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of announcement effect patterns. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance is performed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-2, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the number of times of value notification is determined to be other than 0, the number of times of setting suggestion can be determined, and when the number of times of value notification is determined to be 0, the number of times of setting suggestion is not determined, and a setting suggestion effect is produced. may not be executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , the performance can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect that is the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect that is the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect does not have to be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the value notification production is performed along with the execution of the big hit start production (fanfare production) and the production during the big hit (production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Alternatively, an operation effect that serves as a setting suggesting effect may be made executable. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode in which the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. A determined value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to multiple setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. An arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation by analyzing the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or action execution different. It is acceptable as long as the contents are different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, the degree of reduction, etc.).

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process of FIGS. Based on the detection of the action of the player, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, 60AKS053 shown in FIG. Execution of the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 10-8, for example, which can execute notification effects such as number of times notification effects, for example, performing notification corresponding to the number of times the action effects are executed with action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 In the execution pattern of the action effect by the action effect executing means, the action effect of the number of times indicated in the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, variable display A first execution pattern such as when the result is not a "jackpot" or when the set suggestion number of times is determined to be 0, and an action performance with a smaller number of execution times than indicated in the notification performance are executed within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the action rendering of the remaining number of executions is executed, for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the set suggestion number determination result is other than 0. , the action effect execution means, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is viable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Equipped with advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the processing of step 60AKS024 shown in 10-2, when the notification by the advantageous notification means such as the part that executes the processing of step 60AKS025 is performed, a predetermined period of time In a specific period after the elapse, it may be possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. 10-4, for example, when the advantageous notification means notifies the second advantageous state that the action effect executing means is controlled to the second advantageous state may be able to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the first advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, when the jackpot type "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" shown in FIG. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state by means of the It may be possible to execute the action rendering of the rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4, it is possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode during a specific period only when the advantageous notification means reports that control is to be made to the advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The action effect executing means, for example, when the setting suggestion number of times shown in FIG. , which can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and restricts execution of the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the same mode included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 10-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-6 in the process of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game.

The action effect execution means performs the action effect of the suggestion effect mode at a first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion and a later timing, for example the second suggestion, in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of , and for example, as shown in FIGS. may be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. As a result, the performance can be diversified so as to attract attention to the action performance of the suggestive performance mode, and the game interest can be improved.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that gives an advance notice of being controlled in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 11-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 11-1, various circuits such as a production control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a production data memory 91AK123, a ROM91AK124, a RAM91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the production control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from VDP 91AK132 to CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from VDP 91AK132 to CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), etc. for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 11-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying the performance image, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the unit of is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when the VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either the ROM 91AK 124 or the built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation of moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of the video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of determining moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the dynamic image display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 11-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", a moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach-to-win B (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 11-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 11-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 11-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the contents of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 11-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 11-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 11-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 11-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 11-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 11-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 11-4(A2), as shown in FIG. 11-5(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. display. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 11-4(B), as shown in FIG. 11-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 11-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 11-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 11-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 11-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 11-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation information is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 11-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 11-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 11-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 11-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changeable accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of incongruity in displaying the text image.

FIG. 11-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common effect display is performed in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight against each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 11-7(A) is effect content common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image changes gradually from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, with origin coordinates of (250, 600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 11-7(B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character alignment have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 11-7(B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 11-7(B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "Super hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", one of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image specification information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . The text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at multiple timings.

FIG. 11-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 11-8(A) shows a case where a text image of the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 11-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 11-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds glow, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby improving the game performance with respect to the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIG. 11-9 shows a display example in which a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. Also, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 as the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions is changed according to the elapsed time in the arbitrary execution of the effect, not limited to the situation in which the music is played or the voice of the dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, the part displayed in a display style different from that of other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, thereby improving the player's impression of the display of the text image.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 11-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image related data includes the specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and the normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect is stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in display effects.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when a preset specific text image is displayed, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations of the V stick controller 31A. An arbitrary motion of tilting the rod or a motion of pressing the push button 31b may be used. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this manner, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a moving image effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. , for example, moving image effect execution means such as effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. 2 storage areas, moving image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144 for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and the data stored in the second storage area. and character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling the display of character images. The character image control means includes data on a plurality of character image constituent elements including one constituent element and a second constituent element such as a display style set by text display setting information, and the character image control means adds to one moving image. During the character image display period, the first component and the second component can be changed as shown in FIG. 11-7, for example. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. For example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 11-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as the character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a moving image effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, for example. , for example, moving image effect execution means such as effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. 2 storage areas, moving image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144 for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and the data stored in the second storage area. and character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling the display of character images. The character image control means includes data on a plurality of character image constituent elements including one constituent element and a second constituent element such as a display style set by text display setting information, for example, and the character image control means uses moving image data 91AKD01, for example. A first moving image such as a moving image and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, are processed according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. It is possible to add and display a character image using data related to a common character image such as a text image. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component in the display period of the character image added to one moving image. may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. For example, as shown in FIG. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 11-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

1 pachinko game machine 4A first special symbol display device 4B second special symbol display device 5 image display device 11 main substrate 12 effect control substrate 100 game control microcomputer 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
91AK100 Production control microprocessor 91AK131 CPU
91AK132 VDP
91AK143 Video decoder 91AK144 Video renderer 91AK146 Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 Storage area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player ,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data on a plurality of character image components including a first component and a second component;
data relating to the first component and data relating to the second component are stored in association with time information relating to display timing;
The time information is information corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of displaying the moving image,
The character image control means is
When one moving image is displayed, it is possible to display a character image added to the one moving image,
the first component and the second component can be changed in a predetermined period in which the character image is added to the one moving image and displayed ;
The effect executing means executes, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table. ,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled when the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, rather than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using the first component composed of first character information and the second component composed of first display setting information. and second data for displaying a second character image using the first component configured by second character information and the second component configured by second display setting information. ,
The second character image data table uses the first data, the first element composed of the third character information, and the second element composed of the third display setting information to generate the third character image. and third data that displays
The character image control means is
The second component related to the character image can be changed at a plurality of different timings during the predetermined period ,
a ratio of displaying a character image using the first character image data table or the second character image data table differs between when the setting value is the first setting value and when the setting value is the second setting value;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images